Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 258

BSC6900 UMTS

V900R014C00

Hardware Description

Issue Draft A
Date 2012-02-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users with
a detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R014C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Installers
l Site operators

Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description.
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, and LMT.
3 Cabinet
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet or the Huawei N68E-21-N cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description About This Document

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defence subrack, rear cable
trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack.

5 Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.

6 Boards

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

7 Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

8 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

9 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description About This Document

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description About This Document

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description........................................................1
2 Physical Structure..........................................................................................................................3
3 Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................5
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................6
3.2 Classification of Cabinets...................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Components of the Cabinet................................................................................................................................9
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet...........................................................................................................10
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet....................................................................................................................12
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components..................................................................12
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet............................................................14
3.5.3 Distribution of Signal Cables for the MPR.............................................................................................18
3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR...............................................................................................24

4 Components of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................30


4.1 Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................................31
4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box.............................................................................................31
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box..............................................................................................32
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box........................................................................33
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box.............................................................34
4.2 Air Defence Subrack........................................................................................................................................34
4.3 Rear Cable Trough............................................................................................................................................35
4.4 Independent Fan Subrack.................................................................................................................................35
4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack..........................................................................................36
4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack......................................................................36

5 Subracks........................................................................................................................................38
5.1 Classification of Subracks................................................................................................................................39
5.2 Components of the Subrack..............................................................................................................................39
5.3 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)...................................................................................................41
5.4 Slots in the Subrack..........................................................................................................................................44
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...............................................................................................................................44
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack...........................................................................................................................47

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS........................................................................................................................47


5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.........................................................................................................................47
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack...........................................................................................................48

6 Boards............................................................................................................................................50
6.1 AEUa Board.....................................................................................................................................................56
6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board.................................................................................................................56
6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa Board........................................................................................................................56
6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board.......................................................................................................................57
6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board........................................................................................................................58
6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board...........................................................................................................58
6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board..........................................................................................61
6.2 AOUa Board.....................................................................................................................................................62
6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board.................................................................................................................62
6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board........................................................................................................................63
6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board.......................................................................................................................64
6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board........................................................................................................................64
6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board..........................................................................................................65
6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board.........................................................................................66
6.3 AOUc Board.....................................................................................................................................................68
6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board.................................................................................................................69
6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board........................................................................................................................69
6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board.......................................................................................................................70
6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board........................................................................................................................71
6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board.........................................................................................72
6.4 DPUb Board.....................................................................................................................................................74
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb Board.................................................................................................................74
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board........................................................................................................................75
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board.......................................................................................................................75
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board..........................................................................................76
6.5 DPUe Board......................................................................................................................................................77
6.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board..................................................................................................................77
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board.........................................................................................................................78
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board.......................................................................................................................78
6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board..........................................................................................79
6.6 FG2a Board.......................................................................................................................................................80
6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...................................................................................................................80
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................80
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board........................................................................................................................81
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................82
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board...........................................................................................83
6.7 FG2c Board.......................................................................................................................................................84
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...................................................................................................................84

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................85


6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board........................................................................................................................85
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................86
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board...........................................................................................87
6.8 GCUa and GCGa Board...................................................................................................................................88
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board......................................................................................................88
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................89
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board............................................................................................................90
6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................90
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board..............................................................................91
6.9 GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................................................91
6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board.................................................................................................................92
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board........................................................................................................................92
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board.......................................................................................................................93
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board........................................................................................................................93
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board.........................................................................................93
6.10 GOUc Board...................................................................................................................................................96
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board...............................................................................................................96
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................96
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.....................................................................................................................97
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................98
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board.......................................................................................98
6.11 NIUa Board...................................................................................................................................................101
6.11.1 Functions of the NIUa Board...............................................................................................................101
6.11.2 Panel of the NIUa Board.....................................................................................................................101
6.11.3 LEDs on the NIUa Board....................................................................................................................102
6.11.4 Technical Specifications of the NIUa Board.......................................................................................103
6.12 OMUa Board................................................................................................................................................104
6.12.1 Functions of the OMUa Board............................................................................................................104
6.12.2 Panel of the OMUa Board...................................................................................................................104
6.12.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board..................................................................................................................106
6.12.4 Ports on the OMUa Board...................................................................................................................107
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board.....................................................................................107
6.13 OMUc Board................................................................................................................................................108
6.13.1 Functions of the OMUc Board............................................................................................................109
6.13.2 Panel of the OMUc Board...................................................................................................................109
6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board..................................................................................................................111
6.13.4 Ports on the OMUc Board...................................................................................................................111
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board.....................................................................................112
6.14 PAMU Board................................................................................................................................................113
6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU Board............................................................................................................113
6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board...................................................................................................................114

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board..................................................................................................................114


6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board........................................................................................................115
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board....................................................................................116
6.15 PEUa Board..................................................................................................................................................116
6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa Board..............................................................................................................116
6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................................................117
6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................117
6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa Board.....................................................................................................................118
6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................118
6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.......................................................................................121
6.16 PFCU Board.................................................................................................................................................123
6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU Board.............................................................................................................123
6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board..........................................................................................................123
6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board......................................................................................125
6.17 POUa Board..................................................................................................................................................125
6.17.1 Functions of the POUa Board..............................................................................................................125
6.17.2 Panel of the POUa Board.....................................................................................................................126
6.17.3 LEDs on the POUa Board...................................................................................................................126
6.17.4 Ports on the POUa Board.....................................................................................................................127
6.17.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board.......................................................................................................128
6.17.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board......................................................................................129
6.18 POUc Board..................................................................................................................................................131
6.18.1 Functions of the POUc Board..............................................................................................................132
6.18.2 Panel of the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................132
6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................133
6.18.4 Ports on the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................134
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board......................................................................................135
6.19 SAUa Board..................................................................................................................................................137
6.19.1 Functions of the SAUa Board..............................................................................................................137
6.19.2 Panel of the SAUa Board.....................................................................................................................137
6.19.3 LEDs on the SAUa Board...................................................................................................................139
6.19.4 Ports on the SAUa Board.....................................................................................................................139
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SAUa Board......................................................................................140
6.20 SAUc Board..................................................................................................................................................141
6.20.1 Functions of the SAUc Board..............................................................................................................142
6.20.2 Panel of the SAUc Board.....................................................................................................................142
6.20.3 LEDs on the SAUc Board...................................................................................................................144
6.20.4 Ports on the SAUc Board.....................................................................................................................144
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SAUc Board......................................................................................145
6.21 SCUa Board..................................................................................................................................................146
6.21.1 Functions of the SCUa Board..............................................................................................................146
6.21.2 Panel of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................................................147

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

6.21.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board....................................................................................................................148


6.21.4 Ports on the SCUa Board.....................................................................................................................148
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board......................................................................................149
6.22 SCUb Board..................................................................................................................................................150
6.22.1 Functions of the SCUb Board..............................................................................................................150
6.22.2 Panel of the SCUb Board.....................................................................................................................151
6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board...................................................................................................................152
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUb Board.....................................................................................................................152
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board......................................................................................153
6.23 SPUa Board..................................................................................................................................................154
6.23.1 Functions of the SPUa Board..............................................................................................................155
6.23.2 Panel of the SPUa Board.....................................................................................................................156
6.23.3 LEDs on the SPUa Board....................................................................................................................157
6.23.4 Ports on the SPUa Board.....................................................................................................................157
6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board.......................................................................................158
6.24 SPUb Board..................................................................................................................................................158
6.24.1 Functions of the SPUb Board..............................................................................................................159
6.24.2 Panel of the SPUb Board.....................................................................................................................160
6.24.3 LEDs on the SPUb Board....................................................................................................................161
6.24.4 Ports on the SPUb Board.....................................................................................................................161
6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board......................................................................................162
6.25 UOIa Board...................................................................................................................................................162
6.25.1 Functions of the UOIa Board...............................................................................................................163
6.25.2 Panel of the UOIa Board.....................................................................................................................163
6.25.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board....................................................................................................................164
6.25.4 Ports on the UOIa Board.....................................................................................................................165
6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board.......................................................................................165
6.26 UOIc Board...................................................................................................................................................167
6.26.1 Functions of the UOIc Board...............................................................................................................168
6.26.2 Panel of the UOIc Board.....................................................................................................................168
6.26.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board....................................................................................................................169
6.26.4 Ports on the UOIc Board.....................................................................................................................170
6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board.......................................................................................170

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................173
7.1 Power Cables..................................................................................................................................................176
7.2 PGND Cables.................................................................................................................................................179
7.3 Optical Cable..................................................................................................................................................181
7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler).....................................................................................................182
7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable....................................................................................................................................185
7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable..........................................................................................................187
7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable..........................................................................................................................190
7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable................................................................................................192

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

7.9 BITS Clock Cable...........................................................................................................................................195


7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable.................................................................................................................................197
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................199
7.12 Straight-Through Cable................................................................................................................................199
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack.........................................................................202
7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................203
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box............................................................................204
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable...................................................................................................................206
7.17 OMU serial port cable..................................................................................................................................207
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable............................................................................................................207
7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable...............................................................................................................................208

8 LEDs on the Boards...................................................................................................................210


8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board..............................................................................................................................212
8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board..............................................................................................................................212
8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board..............................................................................................................................213
8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board..............................................................................................................................213
8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board..............................................................................................................................214
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................................215
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................................215
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................................216
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................................217
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board............................................................................................................................217
8.11 LEDs on the NIUa Board.............................................................................................................................218
8.12 LEDs on the OMUa Board...........................................................................................................................219
8.13 LEDs on the OMUc Board...........................................................................................................................220
8.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................................220
8.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................................221
8.16 LEDs on the POUa Board............................................................................................................................222
8.17 LEDs on the POUc Board............................................................................................................................222
8.18 LEDs on the SAUa Board............................................................................................................................223
8.19 LEDs on the SAUc Board............................................................................................................................224
8.20 LEDs on the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................................224
8.21 LEDs on the SCUb Board............................................................................................................................225
8.22 LEDs on the SPUa Board.............................................................................................................................226
8.23 LEDs on the SPUb Board.............................................................................................................................227
8.24 LEDs on the UOIa Board.............................................................................................................................228
8.25 LEDs on the UOIc Board.............................................................................................................................228

9 DIP Switches on Components................................................................................................ 230


9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................231
9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board..................................................................................................................233
9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board.................................................................................................................236
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board...................................................................................................................238

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description Contents

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board..................................................................................................................239


9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.....................................................................................................................241
9.7 DIP Switches on the POUa Board..................................................................................................................243

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware


Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description.

Draft A (2012-02-15)
This is the Draft A release of V900R014C00.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue includes the following new
topics:

l 6.19 SAUa Board


– 6.19.1 Functions of the SAUa Board
– 6.19.2 Panel of the SAUa Board
– 6.19.3 LEDs on the SAUa Board
– 6.19.4 Ports on the SAUa Board
– 6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SAUa Board
l 6.20 SAUc Board
– 6.20.1 Functions of the SAUc Board
– 6.20.2 Panel of the SAUc Board
– 6.20.3 LEDs on the SAUc Board
– 6.20.4 Ports on the SAUc Board
– 6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SAUc Board

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Content Description

6 Boards l Modified the list of boards.


l The DPUe board can replace the DPUg board.
However, the DPUg board cannot replace the DPUe
board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Content Description

6.3.5 Technical Specifications The number of session setup/release times is modified


of the AOUc Board from 3,000/s to 5,000/s.
6.7.5 Technical Specifications
of the FG2c Board
6.10.5 Technical Specifications
of the GOUc Board
6.18.5 Technical Specifications
of the POUc Board
6.26.5 Technical Specifications
of the UOIc Board

Compared with issue 04 (2012-01-05) of V900R013C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, and LMT.

Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900


Component Description

Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables For details, see 7 Cables.

GPS antenna system The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,
and surge protector.
The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It
is optional.

LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal
that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal
software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The
LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.
For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet or the Huawei N68E-21-N cabinet.

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet. The N68E-21-N cabinet is a double-door cabinet.
3.2 Classification of Cabinets
Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR) and the extended
processing rack (EPR).
3.3 Components of the Cabinet
The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence
subrack, independent fan subrack (configured in only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet), cable rack,
rack, and rear cable trough.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet
This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet. The N68E-21-N cabinet is a double-door cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door N68E-22
cabinet.
Figure 3-3 shows the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Single-door N68E-22 cabinet

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-2 Double-door N68E-22 cabinet

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-3 N68E-21-N cabinet

3.2 Classification of Cabinets


Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR) and the extended
processing rack (EPR).

MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be
configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.
For details on the components of the MPR or the EPR, see 3.3 Components of the Cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3.3 Components of the Cabinet


The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence
subrack, independent fan subrack (configured in only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet), cable rack,
rack, and rear cable trough.
Figure 3-4 shows the components of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22 model).

Figure 3-4 Components of the cabinet (N68E-22 model)

(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack

(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-1 Configuration of the cabinet

Component Configuration

Power Distribution Box Only one power distribution box is


configured.

Subrack l The MPR is configured with one


main processing subrack (MPS) and
depending on the traffic volume zero
to two extended processing subracks
(EPSs).
l The EPR is configured with one to
three EPSs, depending on the traffic
volume.

Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are


configured.

Independent Fan Subrack Only one independent fan subrack is


configured in the N68E-22 cabinet and
no independent fan subrack is
configured in the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

NOTE

l The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.
l The components of the N68E-21-N cabinet are the same as those of the N68E-22 cabinet, except that the
N68E-21-N cabinet is not configured with the independent fan subrack.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet


The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-22)


The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 or N68E-21-N cabinet. The two models of cabinets
have different technical specifications.

Table 3-2 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)

Item Specification

Dimensions 2200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Item Specification

Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 100 kg


l Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 320 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V DC power supply

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386


l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC

Power consumption The cabinet power consumption equals the sum of power
consumption of all subracks in the cabinet.
It is recommended that the power distribution system
provide a maximum of 5100 W power per cabinet to
facilitate capacity expansion.

Heat dissipation The heat generated by a cabinet equals the total heat
generated by all subracks in the cabinet.
To facilitate capacity expansion in future, the air
conditioning system installed onsite must be able to
dissipate a maximum of 4100 W heat from each cabinet.

WARNING
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,
multiple boards will become abnormal at the same time.
Therefore, check the power system if multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-21-N)


Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N).

Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N)

Item Specification

Dimensions 2130 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

Height of the available space 44 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 155 kg


l Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 380 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V DC power supply

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Item Specification

EMC l Meets the requirements in GR 1089


l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386
l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC

Power consumption The cabinet power consumption equals the sum of power
consumption of all subracks in the cabinet.
It is recommended that the power distribution system
provide a maximum of 5100 W power per cabinet to
facilitate capacity expansion.

Heat dissipation The heat generated by a cabinet equals the total heat
generated by all subracks in the cabinet.
To facilitate capacity expansion in future, the air
conditioning system installed onsite must be able to
dissipate a maximum of 4100 W heat from each cabinet.

NOTE

An empty cabinet refers to the one that is configured with front and rear doors, side panels, a power
distribution box, and a set of cables.

WARNING
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,
multiple boards will become abnormal at the same time.
Therefore, check the power system if multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet


This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.
NOTE
The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 or N68E-21-N cabinet. Only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet requires
the independent fan subrack. The MPR and EPR mentioned in this section are of the N68E-22 model.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components


This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
of the cabinet.
For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.
Figure 3-5 shows the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR. Table
3-4 describes the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-5 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR

Table 3-4 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR
PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input
Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

63 A -48 V DC A1(-) A7 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on the


output 1 (-) independent fan subrack

A8 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2


(-)

63 A -48 V DC B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on the


output 2 independent fan subrack

B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

63 A RTN power A1(+) A7 RTN RTN power input 2 on the


output 1 (+) independent fan subrack

A8 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


(+) 2

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input


Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

63 A RTN power B1(+) B7 RTN RTN power input 1 on the


output 2 (+) independent fan subrack

B8 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


(+) 2

100 A -48 V DC A3(-) A9 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1


output 1 (-)

A10 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0


(-)

100 A -48 V DC B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1


output 2
B10 NEG -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0
(-)

100 A RTN power A3(+) A9 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


output 1 (+) 1

A10 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


(+) 0

100 A RTN power B3(+) B9 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


output 2 (+) 1

B10 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


(+) 0

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet


The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the
equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
Figure 3-6 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900
(N68E-22 cabinet).

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-22 cabinet

Table 3-5 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900
cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and


the mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting
bar

24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack

31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and


the mounting bar

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Figure 3-7 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the Figure 3-7
(N68E-21-N cabinet).

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-21-N cabinet

Table 3-6 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900
cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and


the mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting
bar

20, 21 PGND cables for the cabinet busbar

24, 25, 26 PGND cables connecting the busbars of different


cabinets

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

3.5.3 Distribution of Signal Cables for the MPR


The signal cables for the MPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, clock signal
cables, and monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


Figure 3-8 shows the connections of the signal cables for the MPR.

NOTE

l The types and number of the interface boards shown in Figure 3-8 are only taken as examples. The
actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l The installation positions and number of the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables are
taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the MPR

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Description About the Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


Table 3-7 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

Table 3-7 Connections of signal cables for the MPR


SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks
Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

1 Monitoring DB15/Port DB9/ The cable is


signal cable for connecting the MONITOR 1 mandatory and is
the power power port on the installed before
distribution box distribution box independent fan delivery. Only one
to the subrack monitoring signal
independent fan cable for the power
subrack distribution box is
configured.

2, 3 GPS signal SMA/ANT port Type N The cable is optional.


transmission on the GCGa connector/ When installed, two
cable connecting board Protect port of cables are required.
GPS surge the GPS surge
protector to protector on top
GCGa board of the cabinet

4 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G l SFP+ high-speed


cable connecting port on the port on the cable
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in l Installed before
different slot 6 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS delivery
subracks

5 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the port on the
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 6 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
subracks

6 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the port on the
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 6 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
subracks

7 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the port on the
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 6 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
subracks

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

8 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the port on the
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 7 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
subracks

9 Ethernet cable RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


connecting SCUb port on the port on the
boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 7 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
subracks

10 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the port on the
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 7 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
subracks

11 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the port on the
SCUb boards of SCUb board in SCUb board in
different slot 7 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
subracks

12, 13 BITS clock signal SMB or BNC/ SMB connector The cable is optional.
cable BITS clock (already When installed, two
source installed on the cables are required.
BITS clock
signal cable)/
CLKIN0 port on
the GCUa/
GCGa board

14, 15 Line clock signal SMB/2M0 or SMB/CLKIN0 Two to four,


cable 2M1 port on the or CLKIN1 port optional, installed
AOUa/POUa/ on the GCUa/ when the EPS is
UOIa/AEUa GCGa board responsible for
board receiving the line
clock signals

16 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN Optional. The


signal cable CLKOUT0 ports port on the number of cables to
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in be installed and their
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS actual installation
slots 12 and 13 positions depend on
the site planning.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

17 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT1 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

18 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT2 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

19 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT3 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

20 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT4 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

21 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT5 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

22 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT6 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

23 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT7 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

24 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT8 ports port on the
on the GCUa/ SCUb board in
GCGa boards in slot 6 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

25 Y-shaped clock RJ45/ RJ45/CLKIN


signal cable CLKOUT9 ports port on the
on GCUa/GCGa SCUb board in
boards in slots slot 7 of the EPS
12 and 13

26 Trunk cable DB44/Electrical Another device Optional. The


connecting AEUa port on the electrical port on the
board to other AEUa board AEUa board is taken
devices as an example. The
number of cables to
27 Y-shaped trunk Y-shaped DB44/ Another device be installed and their
cable connecting Electrical ports actual installation
AEUa board to on active and positions depend on
other devices standby AEUa the site planning.
boards The information here
is an example based
on overhead cabling.

28 Optical cable LC/PC/Optical Another device Optional. The


connecting port on the number of optical
GOUa/AOUa/ GOUa/AOUa/ cables to be installed
POUa/UOIa/ POUa/UOIa/ and their actual
GOUc/AOUc/ GOUc/AOUc/ installation positions
POUc/UOIc POUc/UOIc depend on the site
board to other board planning. The
devices information here is
an example based on
overhead cabling.

29-32 Ethernet cable for RJ45/Ethernet Another device l The cable is


the OMUc board port on the mandatory. Two
OMUc board to four cables are
required.
l Straight-through
cable. The
information here
is an example
based on
overhead
cabling.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

33 Ethernet cable RJ45/Ethernet Another device l Optional. The


connecting FG2a/ port on the number of
FG2c board to FG2a/FG2c Ethernet cables to
other devices board be installed and
their actual
installation
positions depend
on the site
planning.
l Straight-through
cable. The
Ethernet cable
can be connected
to any Ethernet
port on the FG2a/
FG2c board. The
connection here
is only taken as
an example.

34 Monitoring DB15/ DB9/Monitor The cable is


signal cable for MONITOR 0 port on the rear mandatory and is
the independent port on the of the bottom installed before
fan subrack independent fan subrack delivery. Only one
subrack monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack is
configured.

3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR


The signal cables for the EPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, SFP+ high-
speed cables, and monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

Connections of signal cables for the EPR


Figure 3-9 shows the connections of the signal cables for the EPR.

NOTE

l The types and number of the interface boards shown in Figure 3-9 are only taken as examples. The
actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l The installation positions and number of the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables are
taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

Description About the Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR


Table 3-8 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the EPR


SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks
Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

1 Monitoring signal DB15/Port DB9/MONITOR The cable is


cable for the power connecting the 1 port on the mandatory and
distribution box power distribution independent fan is installed
box to the subrack before delivery.
independent fan Only one
subrack monitoring
signal cable for
the power
distribution box
is configured.

2 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G l SFP+ high-


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb speed cable
SCUb boards of board in slot 6 of board in slot 6 of l Installed
different subracks the EPS the MPS before
delivery
3 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G
cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 7 of board in slot 7 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

4 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 6 of board in slot 7 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

5 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 7 of board in slot 6 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

6 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 6 of board in slot 6 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

7 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 7 of board in slot 7 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

8 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 6 of board in slot 6 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

9 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 7 of board in slot 7 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

10 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 7 of board in slot 6 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

11 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 6 of board in slot 7 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

12 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 7 of board in slot 6 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

13 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G RJ45/The 10G


cable connecting port on the SCUb port on the SCUb
SCUb boards of board in slot 6 of board in slot 7 of
different subracks the EPS the MPS

14 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT4 RJ45/CLKIN port Optional. The


signal cable ports on the on the SCUb board number of
GCUa/GCGa in slot 6 of the EPS cables to be
boards in slots 12 installed and
and 13 their actual
installation
15 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT5 RJ45/CLKIN port positions
signal cable ports on the on the SCUb board depend on the
GCUa/GCGa in slot 7 of the EPS site planning.
boards in slots 12
and 13

16 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT6 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on the on the SCUb board
GCUa/GCGa in slot 6 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

17 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT7 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on the on the SCUb board
GCUa/GCGa in slot 7 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

18 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT8 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on the on the SCUb board
GCUa/GCGa in slot 6 of the EPS
boards in slots 12
and 13

19 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT9 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable ports on GCUa/ on the SCUb board
GCGa boards in in slot 7 of the EPS
slots 12 and 13

20 Trunk cable DB44/Electrical Another device Optional. The


connecting the port on the AEUa electrical port
AEUa board to board on the AEUa
other devices board is taken as
an example.
21 Y-shaped trunk Y-shaped DB44/ Another device The number of
cable connecting Electrical ports on cables to be
the AEUa board to active and standby installed and
other devices AEUa boards their actual
installation
positions
depend on the
site planning.
The
information
here is an
example based
on overhead
cabling.

22, 23 Optical cable LC/PC/Optical Another device Optional. The


connecting GOUa/ port on the GOUa/ number of
AOUa/POUa/ AOUa/POUa/ optical cables to
UOIa/GOUc/ UOIa/GOUc/ be installed and
AOUc/POUc/ AOUc/POUc/ their actual
UOIc board to UOIc board installation
other devices positions
depend on the
site planning.
The
information
here is an
example based
on overhead
cabling.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Cable Name Connector Connector Remarks


Type1/ Type2/
Connection Connection
Position1 Position2

24, 25 Line clock signal SMB/2M0 or 2M1 SMB/CLKIN0 or The cable is


cable port on the AOUa/ CLKIN1 port on optional and is
POUa/UOIa/ the GCUa/GCGa installed only
GOUa/GOUc/ board in slot 12 or when the cable
AOUc/POUc/ 13 of the MPS needs to be led
UOIc/AEUa board out from the
EPS in the EPR.
When installed,
two to four
cables are
required.

26 Monitoring signal DB15/MONITOR DB9/MONITOR The cable is


cable for the 0 port on the port on the rear of mandatory and
independent fan independent fan the bottom is installed
subrack subrack subrack before delivery.
Only one
monitoring
signal cable for
the independent
fan subrack is
configured.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4 Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defence subrack, rear cable
trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack.

4.1 Power Distribution Box


A power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top.
4.2 Air Defence Subrack
The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
4.3 Rear Cable Trough
The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
4.4 Independent Fan Subrack
Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4.1 Power Distribution Box


A power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top.

The power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection for the four
-48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet. Each group
has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The power distribution box also detects the status
of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the power distribution box are the panel of the Power
Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.

Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED
(4) Mute switch (5) Power switches (6) Labels for power switches

NOTE

l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.14 PAMU Board.
l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the
RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the
power distribution box.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when
it is faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible
alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box
LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is not working or it


for 0.25s does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the PAMU


board or the power distribution box
does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the power


distribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the power distribution box are the power input terminal
block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack,
and a 2-hole ground screw.
Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal (3) Port used to connect the power
block distribution box to a subrack
(4) 2-hole ground screw (5) J1 port (6) J2 port (port used to connect the power
distribution box to a EMU)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3
(+) and 1(+) respectively.
l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box


This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
power distribution box.

Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the power distribution box.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

Item Sub-item Specification

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A


consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group
B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each
group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
inputs.

Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is
100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Output voltage -40 V DC to -72 V DC


range

Output mode and Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group
current has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
outputs. The maximum rated output current of each
output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.
Each output is controlled by circuit breakers: A7
to A10 and B7 to B10. These circuit breakers
provide the power surge protection function.

Output protection The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need


specifications to manually switch on the corresponding circuit
breaker after the power surge protection.

Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.


Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)
NOTE
For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds
to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs
B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box


The power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relation
between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of the cabinet.
Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power switches on the power distribution box
and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the eight power
switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.

Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR

Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10

Independent fan subrack A7, B7

4.2 Air Defence Subrack


The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Physical appearance
Figure 4-4 shows the air defence subrack.

Figure 4-4 Air defence subrack

Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm
(depth).

4.3 Rear Cable Trough


The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

Figure 4-5 shows the rear cable trough.

Figure 4-5 Rear cable trough

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack


Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack


The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-6 Front view of the independent fan subrack

(1) PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack
(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box

NOTE

The PFCU is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.16 PFCU Board.

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-7 Rear view of the independent fan subrack

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power (2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)
distribution box
(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack


The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).

Table 4-4 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack


Item Specification

Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight Empty subrack: ≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: ≤ 6.9
kg

Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60
V DC.

Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W

Fan speed < 5.0 m/s

EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1


(2000-03).

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5 Subracks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS) and extended
processing subrack (EPS).
5.2 Components of the Subrack
The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
5.3 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.
5.4 Slots in the Subrack
The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check the
bandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enough
bandwidth.
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack
BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS and EPS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks.
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS) and extended
processing subrack (EPS).

MPS
As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured
in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and
maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS
As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the
basic services of the BSC6900.

5.2 Components of the Subrack


The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack


In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in
height. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of the
component layouts of the subrack.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack

(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail


(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Ground screw

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the (9) Cover plate of the DIP switch
power distribution box

Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack


Component Refer to...

Fan box Fan Box

Slots in the subrack 5.4 Slots in the Subrack

Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cables
from the front of the subrack to both sides of the
cabinet.

Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards in


the same subrack.

5.3 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board
(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and
keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans.
l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.16 PFCU
Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (the
fan box is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (the
fan box is not registered).

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Color Status Description

Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and has
one of the following problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l Communication failure
l Fans ceasing to run or
running at too low a speed
l Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered and
has one of the following
problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l Fans ceasing to run or
running at a too low speed
l Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in the
same subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box
and the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,
detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to 55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from
55% to 100% of the full speed.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack


The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check the
bandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enough
bandwidth.

Structure of the Subrack


Figure 5-3 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 5-3 Structure of the subrack

(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered
from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.
l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair
of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active and
standby slots. For example, if slot 00 is configured with the SPUa board, then slot 01 must be configured
with the SPUa board and slot 01 cannot be configured with the SPUb board.
l Different types of boards can be installed in all slots other than active/standby slots. For example, if
slot 00 and slot 01 are configured with SPUa boards, slot 02 and slot 03 can be configured with
SPUb boards.
l If the boards are in resource pool mode, then they can be installed in active/standby slots. For example,
if slot 08 is configured with the DPUb board, slot 09 can be configured with the DPUe board.

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 5-4 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 5-4 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-4 describes the bits.

Table 5-4 Description about the bits


Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Bit Description

8 (the most significant Startup type of the subrack, generally set to OFF
bit)

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Set bit 8 to OFF.
4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 5-5 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 5-5 Setting of the DIP switch

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OF ON ON OFF ON OFF
F

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OF ON ON ON ON OFF
F

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack


BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS and EPS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks.

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS


The MPS is configured in the MPR. Each BSC6900 cabinet must be configured with one MPS.

The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUc board, SCUb board, SPUa/SPUb
board, GCUa board, GCGa board, DPUb/DPUe board, AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/
UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, and GOUa/GOUc board.

Figure 5-5 shows the MPS in full configuration.

Figure 5-5 MPS in full configuration

NOTE

l The INT1 board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board,
PEUa board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l The INT2 board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, PEUa board, POUa/
POUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in
the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby
mode). For details on how to install the software on the SAU board, and how to maintain the SAU
board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS


The EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. The BSC6900 cabinet can be configured with zero
to five EPSs.

The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUb board, SPUa/SPUb board, DPUb/DPUe
board, AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUc board,
FG2a/FG2c board, and GOUa/GOUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-6 shows the EPS in full configuration.

Figure 5-6 EPS in full configuration

NOTE

l The INT1 board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board,
PEUa board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l The INT2 board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, PEUa board, POUa/
POUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in
the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby
mode). For details on how to install the software on the SAU board, and how to maintain the SAU
board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack


The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Table 5-6 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.

Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the subrack


Item Specification

Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards: ≤


57 kg

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Item Specification

Power consumption in full l In the case of ATM transmission


configuration – MPS: ≤ 1,700 W
– EPS: ≤ 1,730 W
l In the case of IP transmission
– MPS: ≤ 1,490 W
– EPS: ≤ 1,310 W

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6 Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.


Some UMTS service boards can replace the GSM service boards. However, the GSM service
boards cannot replace the UMTS service boards.
l The SPUa board can replace the XPUa board. However, the XPUa board cannot replace
the SPUa board.
l The SPUb board can replace the XPUb board. However, the XPUb board cannot replace
the SPUb board.
l The DPUb board can replace the DPUc board. However, the DPUc board cannot replace
the DPUb board.
l The DPUb board can replace the DPUd board. However, the DPUd board cannot replace
the DPUb board.
l The DPUe board can replace the DPUg board. However, the DPUg board cannot replace
the DPUe board.
When UMTS service boards replace GSM service boards, the specifications of UMTS service
boards are the same as the replaced boards, and UMTS service boards need to be configured in
the same way as the replaced boards.

NOTE

For example, when the SPUa board replaces the XPUa board, the SPUa board can be used as the XPUa board.
The specifications of the SPUa board are the same as those of the XPUa board when the SPUa board serves as
the GSM signaling processing board.
You can configure the SPUa board by running the ADD BRD command.
l When Logic function type is set to RGCP, the SPUa board serves as the main control XPUa board.
l When Logic function type is set to GCP, the SPUa board serves as the non-main control XPUa board.

The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.
Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-1 Classification of BSC6900 boards


Board Logical Function Interface Shared by Backplane Backplane
s Supported Bandwidth of Bandwidth of
the Board the Board
When the When the
SCUa Board Is SCUb Board Is
Installed in the Installed in the
Same Subrack Same Subrack

AEUa ATM Iub Iub, Iur, and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

AOUa ATM Iub Iub, Iur, and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

AOUc ATM Iub Iub and Iu 4 GE 4 GE

DPUb UUP (UMTS RNC - - 2 GE 2 GE


user plane processing)

DPUe UUP (UMTS RNC - - 4 GE 4 GE


user plane processing)

FG2a IP Iu, Iur, and Iub Iub and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

FG2c IP Iu, Iur, and Iub Iub and Iu 4 GE 20 GE

GCUa Clock - - 2 GE 2 GE

GCGa Clock with GPS - - 2 GE 2 GE

GOUa IP Iu, Iur, and Iub Iub and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

GOUc IP Iu, Iur, and Iub Iub and Iu 4 GE 20 GE

NIUa NIU (Network - - 2 GE 2 GE


Intelligence Unit)

OMUa OAM (OM - - 2 GE 2 GE


management)

OMUc OAM (OM - - 2 GE 20 GE


management)

PEUa IP Iub Iub and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

POUa IP Iub Iub and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

POUc IP Iub Iub and Iu 4 GE 20 GE

SCUa MAC Switching - - - -

SCUb MAC Switching - - - -

SPUa UCP (UMTS RNC - - 2 GE 2 GE


control plane
processing)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Board Logical Function Interface Shared by Backplane Backplane


s Supported Bandwidth of Bandwidth of
the Board the Board
When the When the
SCUa Board Is SCUb Board Is
Installed in the Installed in the
Same Subrack Same Subrack

RUCP (Resource
management and
UMTS RNC control
plane processing)

SPUb UCP (UMTS RNC - - 2 GE 4 GE


control plane
processing)

RUCP (Resource
management and
UMTS RNC control
plane processing)

UOIa ATM Iu, Iur, and Iub Iub, Iur, and Iu 2 GE 2 GE

UOIc ATM Iu, Iur, and Iub Iub and Iu 4 GE 20 GE

PAMU - - - - -

PFCU - - - - -

6.1 AEUa Board


AEUa refers to 32-port ATM over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The AEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of AEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.2 AOUa Board
AOUa refers to 2-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
AOUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of
AOUa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUa board can
be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the AOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.3 AOUc Board
AOUc refers to 4-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
AOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of AOUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the AOUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.4 DPUb Board
DPUb refers to Data Processing Unit REV:b. The DPUb board is optional. For the MPS, two to
fifteen DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to fifteen DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
6.5 DPUe Board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DPUe refers to Data Processing Unit REV:e. The DPUe board is optional. For the MPS, two to
fifteen DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to fifteen DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
6.6 FG2a Board
FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 4
to 5 and 14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.
6.7 FG2c Board
FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the FG2c
board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23 in the MPS/EPS. When the MPS/EPS is
configured with the SCUb board, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27 in
the MPS/EPS.
6.8 GCUa and GCGa Board
GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.9 GOUa Board
GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.
6.10 GOUc Board
GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS is configured with the SCUa board,
the GOUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23 in the MPS/EPS. When the MPS/
EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14
to 27 in the MPS/EPS.
6.11 NIUa Board
NIUa refers to Network Intelligence Unit REV:a. The NIUa board is optional. For the MPS, one
to five NIUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, 14 to 23, and slots 26 and 27.
For the EPS, one to six NIUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, and slots 8 to 27.
6.12 OMUa Board
OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. One or two OMUa boards must be
configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is twice the width of other boards.
Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots
20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. The OMUa board can be installed
in slots 20 to 23 in inventory sites and in slots 24 to 27 in new sites.
6.13 OMUc Board
OMUc refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:c. A pair of active/standby OMUc boards
must be configured. The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24
to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.
6.14 PAMU Board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.
6.15 PEUa Board
PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and
14 to 23. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.
6.16 PFCU Board
PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.17 POUa Board
POUa refers to 2-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
POUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of POUa
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.18 POUc Board
POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of POUc boards
to be installed depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the
SCUa board. For the MPS/EPS/TCS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to
23. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the SCUb board, the POUc board can be
installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.
6.19 SAUa Board
SAUa (Service Aware Unit REV:a): SAUa refers to the Service Aware Unit REV:a. The SAUa
board is twice the width of other boards. One SAUa board occupies two slots. The SAUa board
can be installed in the slots except slots 6, 7, 12, and 13 in the MPS, or installed in the slots
except slots 6 and 7 on the lowest EPS of the EPR. Rear slots of the MPS are recommended.
6.20 SAUc Board
SAUc refers to Service Aware Unit REV:c. The SAUc board can be installed in the slots except
slots 6, 7, 12, and 13 in the MPS. Rear slots of the MPS are recommended.
6.21 SCUa Board
SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.
6.22 SCUb Board
SCUb refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:b. The SCUb board is mandatory.
Two SCUb boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.
6.23 SPUa Board
SPUa refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:a. The SPUa board is optional. Two to eighteen
SPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUa boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
6.24 SPUb Board
SPUb refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:b. The SPUb board is optional. Two to eighteen
SPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the SPUb boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23 and slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUb
boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5 and slots 8 to 27.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.25 UOIa Board


UOIa refers to 4-port ATM over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit REV:a.
The UOIa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of
UOIa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the UOIa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.26 UOIc Board
UOIc refers to 8-port ATM over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit REV:c.
The UOIc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of UOIc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS is configured with the
SCUa board, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/EPS. When the MPS/
EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 27 in the
MPS/EPS.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.1 AEUa Board


AEUa refers to 32-port ATM over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The AEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of AEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the AEUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the AEUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board


As an interface board, the AEUa board supports ATM over E1/T1/J1 transmission.
The AEUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides 32 channels of ATM over E1s/T1s/J1s
l Provides 32 IMA groups or 32 UNI links
l Supports the Iub interfaces
l Provides the fractional ATM and the fractional IMA functions
l Supports the timeslot cross-connection function
l Receives clock signals from the Iu interface and transmits clock signals to the GCUa/GCGa
board

6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AEUa board.
Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the AEUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-1 Panel of the AEUa board

6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the AEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the AEUa board.
Table 6-3 describes the ports on the AEUa board.

Table 6-3 Ports on the AEUa board


Port Function Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 0-7

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 8-15

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 16-23

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/ DB44
T1 signals on channels 24-31

2M0 and 2M1 Ports for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board


The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 6-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-2, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-2 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches


DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-4 describes S2, S4, S6,
S8, and S10.

Table 6-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 31
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 23
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 7
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 15

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

OFF Set the working mode


to other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for (ON, ON) Set the working mode
setting the to E1 unbalanced mode
working mode,
consisting of two (OFF, ON) Set the working mode
bits to E1 balanced mode

(ON, OFF) Set the working mode


to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Set the working mode


to J1 mode

6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board


The technical specifications of the AEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-5 describes the hardware specifications of the AEUa board.

Table 6-5 Hardware specifications of the AEUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 27.87 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-6 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-6 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 32

Speech service in the CS domain 2,800 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 680 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 45 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 45 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 90 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

6.2 AOUa Board


AOUa refers to 2-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
AOUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of
AOUa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUa board can
be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the AOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the AOUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the AOUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the AOUa board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.

The AOUa board performs the following functions:

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Provides two channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on ATM
l Provides the AAL2 switching function
l Provides the IMA and the UNI functions
l Supports the Iub interfaces
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUa board.

Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the AOUa board.

Figure 6-3 Panel of the AOUa board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-7 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 6-7 LEDs on the AOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-8 describes the ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-8 Ports on the AOUa board

Port Port Function Connecto Multiplexin Multiple


Location r Type g E1 Port xing T1
Number Port
Number

The first port RX Receiving LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83


under LEDs optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

The second RX Receiving LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167


port under optical port
LEDs
TX Transmitting
optical port

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Port Port Function Connecto Multiplexin Multiple


Location r Type g E1 Port xing T1
Number Port
Number

Right above 2M0 and Port for 2 MHz SMB male - -


the sign 2M1 clock signal connector
"PARC" outputs

6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board


The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 6-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Figure 6-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

CAUTION
All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is
faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 6-9 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Table 6-9 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board


DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning
DIP Bit

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Set loading mode to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Set loading mode to CPU slave parallel


configuration

3 ON Set working mode to T1 mode

OFF Set working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Set the mapped path to AU3

OFF Set the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Set the information structure to TU11

OFF Set the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board


The technical specifications of the AOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-10 describes the hardware specifications of the AOUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-10 Hardware specifications of the AOUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane
of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power 37.30 W
consumption

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating 0°C to 45°C


temperature
(long-term)

Operating -5°C to +55°C


temperature
(short-term)

Relative 5% to 85%
humidity (long-
term)

Relative 5% to 95%
humidity (short-
term)

Table 6-11 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-11 Specifications for the board processing capability


Item Specification

Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 126

Speech service in the CS 9,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 195 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 195 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 390 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-12 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-12 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.3 AOUc Board


AOUc refers to 4-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
AOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of AOUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the AOUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the AOUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the AOUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the AOUc board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
The AOUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over the channelized STM-1/OC-3 optical ports
l Supports the IMA function
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals
l Supports the Iub interfaces
NOTE
The AOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as transmission
port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as
establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUc board.
Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the AOUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-5 Panel of the AOUc board

6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-13 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 6-13 LEDs on the AOUc board

LED Colo Status Description


r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Colo Status Description


r

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-14 describes the ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-14 Ports on the AOUc board

Port Port Function Connector Multiplexing Multiplexing


Num Type E1 Port T1 Port
ber Number Number

0 RX Receiving LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83
optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

1 RX Receiving LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

2 RX Receiving LC/PC 126 to 188 168 to 251


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Port Port Function Connector Multiplexing Multiplexing


Num Type E1 Port T1 Port
ber Number Number

3 RX Receiving LC/PC 189 to 251 252 to 335


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board


The technical specifications of the AOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-15 describes the hardware specifications of the AOUc board.

Table 6-15 Hardware specifications of the AOUc board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane
of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power 75.19 W
consumption

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating 0°C to 45°C


temperature
(long-term)

Operating -5°C to +55°C


temperature
(short-term)

Relative 5% to 85%
humidity (long-
term)

Relative 5% to 95%
humidity (short-
term)

Table 6-16 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-16 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 79,000

Session setup/release times 5000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500

Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 300 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 300 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 600 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-17 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.4 DPUb Board


DPUb refers to Data Processing Unit REV:b. The DPUb board is optional. For the MPS, two to
fifteen DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to fifteen DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUb boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUb boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb Board


The DPUb board processes and distributes the UMTS user-plane service data.

The DPUb board has 22 logical subsystems.

The DPUb board performs the following functions:

l Multiplexes and demultiplexes


l Processes frame protocols
l Selects and distributes data
l Performs the functions of the GTP-U, IUUP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and FP protocols
l Performs encryption, decryption, and paging
l Processes internal communication protocols between the SPUa/SPUb board and the DPUb
board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Processes the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) at the RLC layer and
the MAC layer

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUb board.

Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the DPUb board.

Figure 6-6 Panel of the DPUb board

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-18 LEDs on the DPUb board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board


The technical specifications of the DPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-19 describes the technical specifications of the DPUb board.

Table 6-19 Technical specifications of the DPUb board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 60 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Processing capability l Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 115


Mbit/s based on the conditions of UL 64
kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s
l Supporting 1,800 Erlang for CS speech
services
l Supporting 900 Erlang for CS data services
l Supporting 150 cells
l Supporting a maximum of 3300 active
subscribers (DCH/HSDPA/FACH)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.5 DPUe Board


DPUe refers to Data Processing Unit REV:e. The DPUe board is optional. For the MPS, two to
fifteen DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to fifteen DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board


The DPUe board processes and distributes the UMTS user-plane service data.

The DPUe board has 28 logical subsystems.

The DPUe board performs the following functions:

l Multiplexes and demultiplexes


l Processes frame protocols
l Selects and distributes data
l Performs the functions of the GTP-U, IUUP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and FP protocols
l Performs encryption, decryption, and paging
l Processes internal communication protocols between the SPUa/SPUb board and the DPUe
board
l Processes the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) at the RLC layer and
the MAC layer

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUe board.
Figure 6-7 shows the panel of the DPUe board.

Figure 6-7 Panel of the DPUe board

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-20 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-20 LEDs on the DPUe board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board


The technical specifications of the DPUe board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-21 describes the technical specifications of the DPUe board.

Table 6-21 Technical specifications of the DPUe board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 62.32 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Processing capability l Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 335


Mbit/s based on the conditions of UL 64
kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s; Supporting the UL
+DL data stream at 800 Mbit/s based on the
conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/
s if the capacity license is configured
l Supporting 3,350 Erlang for CS speech
services
l Supporting 1,675 Erlang for CS data service
l Supporting 300 cells
l Supporting a maximum of 5880 active
subscribers (DCH/HSDPA/FACH)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.6 FG2a Board


FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 4
to 5 and 14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.

The FG2a board performs the following functions:

l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports


l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.

Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board

6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board


There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2a board


Port Function Connector
Type

FE(1) to FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit RJ45


10/100M signals

FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 10/100/1000M signals

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board


The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.

Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 38.48 W

Weight 1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

Session setup/release times 1000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 300

Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

6.7 FG2c Board


FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the FG2c
board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23 in the MPS/EPS. When the MPS/EPS is
configured with the SCUb board, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27 in
the MPS/EPS.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board


As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The FG2c board performs the following functions:

l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channels
over GE ports
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
NOTE

l The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.

Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2c board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-27 describes the ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2c board


Port Function Connector
Type

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M RJ45


signals

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 100/1000M signals

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board


The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-28 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.

Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-29 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification with Specification with


the SCUa board the SCUb board
Configured Configured

Number of UDP (User Datagram 129,000 129,000


Protocol) ports

Session setup/release times 5,000/s 5,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500 500

Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS 18,000 Erlang 18,000 Erlang


domain

Maximum payload 1,300 Mbit/s 2,600 Mbit/s


throughput (UL)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification with Specification with


the SCUa board the SCUb board
Configured Configured

Maximum payload 1,300 Mbit/s 2,600 Mbit/s


throughput (DL)

Maximum payload 2,600 Mbit/s 2,600 Mbit/s


throughput (UL+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS 9,000 Erlang 9,000 Erlang


domain

Iu-PS Maximum payload 1,600 Mbit/s 3,200 Mbit/s


throughput (UL)

Maximum payload 1,600 Mbit/s 3,200 Mbit/s


throughput (DL)

Maximum payload 3,200 Mbit/s 3,200 Mbit/s


throughput (UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

6.8 GCUa and GCGa Board


GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.

6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.

The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:

l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the
synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals
and the reference clock for the entire system
l Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Generates RFN signals for the system


l Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock
phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase
in the case of active/standby switchover.
l Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS
card. (Only the GCGa board supports this function.)

6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Figure 6-10 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-31 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board

Port Function Connector Type

ANT Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa SMA male
board is used to receive the timing signals and connector
positioning information from the GPS satellite. This
port is not used on the GCUa board.

CLKOUT0 to Ports for providing synchronization clock signals. RJ45


CLKOUT9 The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals
and 1PPS clock signals.

COM0 Reserved RJ45

COM1 Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals RJ45

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are SMB male
used for testing. connector

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Port Function Connector Type

TESTIN Input port for testing external clock signals SMB male
connector

CLKIN0 and Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock SMB male
CLKIN1 signals connector

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

Table 6-32 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W

Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade Grade three

6.9 GOUa Board


GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
The GOUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUa board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-34 describes the ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board


The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane


of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 37.30 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

Session setup/release times 1000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 300

Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 840 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 G-850 Optical Module 1.25 G-1310


nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum optical 0.5 km 10 km


transmission
distance

Maximum output -2.5 dBm -3.0 dBm


optical power

Minimum output -9.5 dBm -9.5 dBm


optical power

Minimum receiver -17.0 dBm -20.0 dBm


sensitivity

Overload receive 0.0 dBm -3.0 dBm


optical power

Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.10 GOUc Board


GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS is configured with the SCUa board,
the GOUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23 in the MPS/EPS. When the MPS/
EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14
to 27 in the MPS/EPS.

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The GOUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over GE ports
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
NOTE

l The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUc board

6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board


The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-40 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.

Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-41 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification with Specification with
the SCUa board the SCUb board
Configured Configured

Number of UDP (User Datagram 129,000 129,000


Protocol) ports

Session setup/release times 5,000/s 5,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500 500

Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS 18,000 Erlang 18,000 Erlang


domain

Maximum payload 1,300 Mbit/s 2,600 Mbit/s


throughput (UL)

Maximum payload 1,300 Mbit/s 2,600 Mbit/s


throughput (DL)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification with Specification with


the SCUa board the SCUb board
Configured Configured

Maximum payload 2,600 Mbit/s 2,600 Mbit/s


throughput (UL+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS 18,000 Erlang 18,000 Erlang


domain

Data service in the CS 9,000 Erlang 9,000 Erlang


domain

Iu-PS Maximum payload 1,600 Mbit/s 3,200 Mbit/s


throughput (UL)

Maximum payload 1,600 Mbit/s 3,200 Mbit/s


throughput (DL)

Maximum payload 3,200 Mbit/s 3,200 Mbit/s


throughput (UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 Optical Module 1.25 G-850


G-1310 nm-10 km-SM- nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
ESFP

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Transmission 10 km 0.5 km
distance

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 Optical Module 1.25 G-850


G-1310 nm-10 km-SM- nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
ESFP

Maximum output -3 dBm -3 dBm


optical power

Minimum output -9.5 dBm -9 dBm


optical power

Minimum receiver -23 dBm -20 dBm


sensitivity

6.11 NIUa Board


NIUa refers to Network Intelligence Unit REV:a. The NIUa board is optional. For the MPS, one
to five NIUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, 14 to 23, and slots 26 and 27.
For the EPS, one to six NIUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, and slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the NIUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 and 25 of the MPS, the NIUa boards can be installed in slots
24 and 25 of the MPS.

6.11.1 Functions of the NIUa Board


The NIUa board performs service awareness functions.
The NIUa board performs the following functions:
l Identifies web browsing services.
l Identifies P2P downloading services.

6.11.2 Panel of the NIUa Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the NIUa board.
Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the NIUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-13 Panel of the NIUa board

6.11.3 LEDs on the NIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-43 describes the LEDs on the NIUa board.

Table 6-43 LEDs on the NIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

6.11.4 Technical Specifications of the NIUa Board


The technical specifications of the NIUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-44 describes the technical specifications of the NIUa board.

Table 6-44 Technical specifications of the NIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 62.32 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 50 Mbit/


s; Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 3200
Mbit/s if 63 Network Intelligence Throughput
License are configured (The step of Network
Intelligence Throughput Licenses is 50 Mbit/s)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.12 OMUa Board


OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. One or two OMUa boards must be
configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is twice the width of other boards.
Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots
20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. The OMUa board can be installed
in slots 20 to 23 in inventory sites and in slots 24 to 27 in new sites.

NOTE
This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa boards are installed in slots
24 to 27.

6.12.1 Functions of the OMUa Board


The OMUa board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUa board performs the following functions:
l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,
security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900

6.12.2 Panel of the OMUa Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa board. In addition, there are hard
disks installed on the OMUa board.
Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the OMUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-14 Panel of the OMUa board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET Button (8) SHUTDOWN Button
(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port
(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED
(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for fixing the hard disk

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l To power off the OMUa board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers
away from the front panel of the OMUa board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power
switch.
l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.
l Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing the
RESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operating
the two buttons whenever possible.

6.12.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
Table 6-45 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 6-45 LEDs on the OMUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.12.4 Ports on the OMUa Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa board.

Table 6-46 describes the ports on the OMUa board.

Table 6-46 Ports on the OMUa board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to -


connect USB devices.

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports RJ45

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC Serial port. This port is used for DB9


system commissioning or for
common serial port usage.

VGA Port for the video DB15

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board


This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa board, including dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs, power consumption,
weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-47 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board.

Table 6-47 Hardware configuration indexes

Item Index of the OMUa board

Dimensions 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Number of CPUs 4

Power consumption 120 W

Weight 4.0 kg

Hard disk capacity 146 G x 2 (RAID 1)

Memory capacity 2G

Temperature required when 5°C to 40°C


working for a long time

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Index of the OMUa board

Temperature required when 0°C to 50°C


working for a short time

Relative humidity required 5% to 85%


when working for a long time

Relative humidity required 5% to 95%


when working for a short time

Performance Counters
Table 6-48 lists the performance counters of the OMUa board.

Table 6-48 Performance counters

Counter Index of the OMUa Board

Number of recorded The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.


alarms

Time when the standby The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU data is OMU board every second.
synchronized with the
active OMU data

Duration of the Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
synchronization between according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files

Duration of the Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover being
switchover between the accepted to the switchover being finished. The switchover is
active and standby OMUs finished in four minutes.

Duration of the OMU Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. This
restart duration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUa board contains mechanical hard disk. Adverse environments, such as high
temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.

To ensure the lifespan of the OMUa board, the OMUa board must be protected against vibration,
shock, and abnormal shutdown.

6.13 OMUc Board


OMUc refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:c. A pair of active/standby OMUc boards
must be configured. The OMUc boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24
to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUc boards are installed in
slots 24 to 25.
l The OMUc and OMUa boards cannot be installed in the same subrack.

6.13.1 Functions of the OMUc Board


The OMUc board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUc board performs the following functions:
l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,
security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUb
board of the BSC6900

6.13.2 Panel of the OMUc Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUc board.
Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the OMUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-15 Panel of the OMUc board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) POWER Button (8) HDD LED
(9) OFL LED (10) COM port (11) ETH0 Ethernet port (12) ETH1 Ethernet port
(13) VGA port (14) USB port (15) ETH2 Ethernet port

NOTE

To power off the OMUc board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away
from the front panel of the OMUc board. After the OFL (OFFLINE) LED is on, turn off the power switch.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 6-49 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.

Table 6-49 LEDs on the OMUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written.

6.13.4 Ports on the OMUc Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0, and one VGA port on the
OMUc board.
Table 6-50 describes the ports on the OMUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-50 Ports on the OMUc board


Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to TYPE-A
connect USB devices.

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports. RJ45

COM Serial port. This port is used for DB9


system commissioning or for
common serial port usage.

VGA Port for the video. DB15

6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board


The technical specifications of the OMUc board include hardware configuration indexes and
performance counters. The hardware configuration indexes refer to the dimensions, power
supply, number of CPUs, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-51 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board.

Table 6-51 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board


Item Index of the OMUc board

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Number of CPUs 6

Power consumption 90 W

Weight 2.5 kg

Hard disk capacity 500 GB

Memory capacity 8 GB

Temperature required when 5°C to 40°C


working for a long time

Temperature required when 0°C to 50°C


working for a short time

Relative humidity required 5% to 85%


when working for a long time

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Index of the OMUc board

Relative humidity required 5% to 95%


when working for a short time

Performance Counters
Table 6-52 describes the performance counters of the OMUc board.

Table 6-52 Performance counters of the OMUc board

Item Index of the OMUc board

Number of recorded The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.


alarms

Time when the standby The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU data is OMU board every second.
synchronized with the
active OMU data

Duration of the Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
synchronization between according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files

Duration of the Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover being
switchover between the accepted to the switchover being finished. The switchover is
active and standby OMUs finished in four minutes.

Duration of the OMU Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. This
restart duration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUc board contains mechanical hard disk. Adverse environments, such as high
temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.

To ensure the lifespan of the OMUc board, the OMUc board must be protected against vibration,
shock and abnormal shutdown.

6.14 PAMU Board


PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.

6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU Board


The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

The PAMU board performs the following functions:


l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms
l Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms
l Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board
l Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board


On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

Figure 6-16 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 6-53 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-53 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-17 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
6-54.

Table 6-54 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-54.

6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board


The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.
Table 6-55 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.

Table 6-55 Technical specifications of the PAMU board


Item Specification

Dimensions 340 mm x 72 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption 15 W

Weight 0.2 kg

6.15 PEUa Board


PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and
14 to 23. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
The PEUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP
links
l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa
boards
l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission
rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.
l Supports the Iub interfaces

6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-18 Panel of the PEUa board

6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-56 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-56 LEDs on the PEUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-57 describes the ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-57 Ports on the PEUa board


Port Function Connector
Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 0-7

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 8-15

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 16-23

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 24-31

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-19 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-19, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-19 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-58 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.

Table 6-58 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the (ON, ON) Setting the
working mode, working mode to
consisting of two bits E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the


working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
J1 mode

6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board


The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-59 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.

Table 6-59 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power consumption 27.53 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-60 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-60 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) 23,000


ports

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 32

Speech service in the CS domain 2,800 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 850 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 60 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 60 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 120 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.16 PFCU Board


PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU Board


The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
The PFCU board performs the following functions:
l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED
l Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, to report the working status of the fan box
l Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors
l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed
l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-20 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-20 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-61. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-61 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description


Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant OFF 1


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-21 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-21 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-62. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Table 6-62 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description


Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.
Table 6-63 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.

Table 6-63 Technical specifications of the PFCU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C (basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%
to 100% of the full speed.

6.17 POUa Board


POUa refers to 2-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The
POUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of POUa
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the POUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.17.1 Functions of the POUa Board


As an interface board, the POUa board supports channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission based
on IP protocol.
The POUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides two channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol
l Supports IP over E1/T1 over SDH/SONET
l Provides MLPPP groups.
l Supports 126 E1s or 168 T1s
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUa boards
l Supports the Iub interfaces
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.17.2 Panel of the POUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUa board.
Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the POUa board.

Figure 6-22 Panel of the POUa board

6.17.3 LEDs on the POUa Board


There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-64 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-64 LEDs on the POUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.17.4 Ports on the POUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-65 describes the ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-65 Ports on the POUa board

Port Port Function Connecto Multiplexin Multiple


Location r Type g E1 Port xing T1
Number Port
Number

The first port RX Receiving LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83


under LEDs optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

The second RX Receiving LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167


port under optical port
LEDs
TX Transmitting
optical port

Right above 2M0 and Port for 2 MHz SMB male - -


the sign 2M1 clock signal connector
"PARC" outputs

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.17.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board


The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 6-23 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel
is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 6-66 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-66 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board


DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode


to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode


to CPU slave parallel
configuration

3 ON Setting working mode


to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode


to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped


path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped


path to AU4

5 ON Setting the
information structure
to TU11

OFF Setting the


information structure
to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

6.17.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board


The technical specifications of the POUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-67 describes the hardware specifications of the POUa board.

Table 6-67 Hardware specifications of the POUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 43.14 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-68 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-68 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) 23,000


ports

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 126

Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 1,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 120 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 120 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 240 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-69 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-69 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.18 POUc Board


POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of POUc boards
to be installed depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the
SCUa board. For the MPS/EPS/TCS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to
23. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the SCUb board, the POUc board can be
installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.18.1 Functions of the POUc Board


As an interface board, the POUc board supports IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission.
The POUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol
l Supports the PPP function
l Extracts line clock signals
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUc boards
l Supports the Iub interfaces
NOTE
The POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when the
ports on the POUc board use different transmission modes.
l When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control plane
functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
l When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management
plane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics
reporting, transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing of
channels for data flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SL
protocols.

6.18.2 Panel of the POUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
Figure 6-24 shows the panel of the POUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board

6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-70 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 6-70 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.18.4 Ports on the POUc Board


There are four optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-71 describes the ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-71 Ports on the POUc board

Port Port Function Connector Multiplexing Multiplexing


Num Type E1 Port T1 Port
ber Number Number

0 RX Receiving LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83
optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

1 RX Receiving LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

2 RX Receiving LC/PC 126 to 188 168 to 251


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

3 RX Receiving LC/PC 189 to 251 252 to 335


optical port

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Port Port Function Connector Multiplexing Multiplexing


Num Type E1 Port T1 Port
ber Number Number

TX Transmitting
optical port

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board


The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-72 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.

Table 6-72 Hardware specifications of the POUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 77.25 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Temperature required when working for a 0°C to 45°C


long time

Temperature required when working for a -5°C to +55°C


short time

Relative humidity required when working 5% to 85%


for a long time

Relative humidity required when working 5% to 95%


for a short time

Table 6-73 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-73 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Number of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 129,000


ports

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Session setup/release times 5000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 252

Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput 400 Mbit/s


(UL)

Maximum payload throughput 400 Mbit/s


(DL)

Maximum payload throughput 800 Mbit/s


(UL+DL)

NOTE

l The specifications stated above are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capability of an Iub/Iu/
Iur interface board.
l The Iur service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub service processing
specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-74 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-74 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.19 SAUa Board


SAUa (Service Aware Unit REV:a): SAUa refers to the Service Aware Unit REV:a. The SAUa
board is twice the width of other boards. One SAUa board occupies two slots. The SAUa board
can be installed in the slots except slots 6, 7, 12, and 13 in the MPS, or installed in the slots
except slots 6 and 7 on the lowest EPS of the EPR. Rear slots of the MPS are recommended.

NOTE

l The standby SAUa board is not required. An SAUa board is optionally installed in one BSC6900.
l The SAUa board must be installed in the lowest subrack of the cabinet for good heat dissipation.
l The SAUa board is preferentially installed in the MPS.
l The SAUa board is installed in the MPS. When the MPS is reset, other boards except the OMUa/
OMUc and SAUa board will be reset, which has no impact on SAUa services.
l The SAUa is installed in the EPS. When the EPS is reset, other boards except the SAUa board will be
reset, which has no impact on SAUa services.

6.19.1 Functions of the SAUa Board


The SAUa board collects data reported by the NEs and pre-processes the collected data. The
pre-processed data is uploaded to the Nastar through the M2000 for analysis.

The SAUa board performs the following functions:

l Receives the MML command from the Nastar system to manage and pre-process the data.
l Pre-processes the raw data reported by the NEs, that is, filters and summarizes raw data of
the BSC6900 as required by the Nastar.
l Uploads the pre-processed data to the Nastar through the M2000 for analysis.

6.19.2 Panel of the SAUa Board


There are LEDs, ports, buttons, and hard disks on the panel of the SAUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-25 shows the panel of the SAUa board.

Figure 6-25 Panel of the SAUa board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET Button (8) SHUTDOWN Button
(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port
(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED
(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for securing the hard disk

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l In a normal situation, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away from
the front panel of the SAUa board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power switch.
l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.
l If possible, avoid pressing the SHUTDOWN or RESET button, which may scratch the surface of the
hard disks in the SAUa board.

6.19.3 LEDs on the SAUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.
Table 6-75 describes the LEDs on the SAUa board.

Table 6-75 LEDs on the SAUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is an alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is being


read or written.

Blinking Data on the hard disk is being read


or written.

6.19.4 Ports on the SAUa Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC port, and one VGA
port on the SAUa board.
Table 6-76 describes the ports on the SAUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-76 Ports on the SAUa board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to USB
connect USB devices.

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports RJ45

COM-ALM/COM-BMC Serial port. This port is used for DB9


system commissioning or as a
common serial port.

VGA Port for the video DB15

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SAUa Board


The technical specifications of the SAUa board include physical specifications and performance
counters. The physical specifications refer to the dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs,
power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, operating temperature, and
relative humidity.

Physical Specifications
Table 6-77 describes the physical specifications for the SAUa board.

Table 6-77 Physical specifications

Item Specifications of the SAUa Board

Dimensions 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC inputs in active/standby mode.


The power inputs are led by the backplane of
the subrack.

Number of CPUs 4

Power consumption 120 W

Weight 4.0 kg

Capacity of the hard disk 146 G x 2 (RAID 1)

Memory capacity 2G

Temperature required for the long-term 5°C to 40°C


operation

Temperature required for the short-term 0°C to 50°C


operation

Relative humidity required for the long-term 5% to 85%


operation

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specifications of the SAUa Board

Relative humidity required for the short-term 5% to 95%


operation

Performance Counters
Table 6-78 describes the performance counters for the SAUa board.

Table 6-78 Performance counters

Item Counters of the SAUa Board

Time taken for starting The restart of the SAUa caused by a fault lasts for about three
the SAUa board minutes.

Bandwidth Requirement
The SAUa board occupies certain bandwidth when communicating with the M2000.
Table 6-79 describes the bandwidth for communication between the SAUa board and the
M2000.

Table 6-79 Bandwidth for communication between the SAUa board and the M2000

Number of UMTS Transmission Bandwidth (kbit/s)


Cells

Number of cells < 500 128

500 ≤ Number of cells 768


≤ 1500

Number of cells < 1500 2048

The SAUa board contains a mechanical hard disk. Due to a short lifespan of the mechanical hard
disk, the lifespan of the SAUa board is about 5 years.
The lifespan of the board is shortened by adverse environments, such as high temperature and
high altitude.
To ensure the lifespan of the SAUa board, the SAUa board must be protected against vibration,
shock and abnormal shutdown.

6.20 SAUc Board


SAUc refers to Service Aware Unit REV:c. The SAUc board can be installed in the slots except
slots 6, 7, 12, and 13 in the MPS. Rear slots of the MPS are recommended.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l The standby SAUc board is not required. One SAUc board is optionally installed in one BSC6900.
l The SAUc board must be installed in the MPS and cannot be installed in the EPS for good heat dissipation.
The SAUc board is installed in the MPS. When the MPS is reset, other boards except the OMUa/OMUc and
SAUc board will be reset, which has no impact on SAU services.
l The SAUc and OMUa/OMUc boards cannot be configured in a pair of active/standby slots.

6.20.1 Functions of the SAUc Board


The SAUc board collects data reported by the NEs and pre-processes the collected data. The
pre-processed data is uploaded to the Nastar through the M2000 for analysis.
The SAUc board performs the following functions:
l Receives the MML command from the Nastar system to manage and pre-process the data.
l Pre-processes the raw data reported by the NEs, that is, filters and summarizes raw data of
the BSC6900 as required by the Nastar.
l Uploads the pre-processed data to the Nastar through the M2000 for analysis.

6.20.2 Panel of the SAUc Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the SAUc board.
Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the SAUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-26 Panel of the SAUc board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) Power button (8) HDD LED
(9) OFL LED (10) COM port (11) ETH0 Ethernet port (12) ETH1 Ethernet port
(13) VGA port (14) USB port (15) ETH2 Ethernet port

NOTE
In a normal situation, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away from the
front panel of the SAUc board. After the OFL (OFFLINE) LED is on, turn off the power switch.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.20.3 LEDs on the SAUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.

Table 6-80 describes the LEDs on the SAUc board.

Table 6-80 LEDs on the SAUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is an alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HDD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is being


read or written.

Blinking Data on the hard disk is being read


or written.

6.20.4 Ports on the SAUc Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one COM port, and one VGA port on the SAUc board.

Table 6-81 describes the ports on the SAUc board.

Table 6-81 Ports on the SAUc board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to USB
connect USB devices.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Port Function Connector Type

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports RJ45

COM Serial port for commissioning DB9

VGA Port for the video DB15

6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SAUc Board


The technical specifications of the SAUc board include physical specifications and performance
counters. The physical specifications refer to the dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs,
power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, operating temperature, and
relative humidity.

Physical Specifications
Table 6-82 describes the physical specifications of the SAUc board.

Table 6-82 Physical specifications


Item Specifications of the SAUc Board

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC inputs in active/standby mode. The power


inputs are led by the backplane of the subrack.

Number of CPUs 6

Power consumption 90 W

Weight 2.5 kg

Capacity of the hard disk 500 GB

Memory capacity 8 GB

Temperature required for the 5°C to 40°C


long-term operation

Temperature required for the 0°C to 50°C


short-term operation

Relative humidity required 5% to 85%


for the long-term operation

Relative humidity required 5% to 95%


for the short-term operation

Performance Counters
Table 6-83 describes the performance specifications of the SAUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-83 Performance counters


Item Specifications of the SAUc Board

Time taken for starting The restart of the SAUc caused by a fault lasts for about three
the SAUc board minutes.

Bandwidth Requirement
The SAUc board occupies certain bandwidth when communicating with the M2000.
Table 6-84 describes the bandwidth occupied by the SAUc board.

Table 6-84 Bandwidth for communication between the SAUc board and the M2000
Number of UMTS Transmission Bandwidth (kbit/s)
Cells

Number of cells < 500 128

500 ≤ Number of cells 768


≤ 1500

Number of cells < 1500 2048

The SAUc board contains a mechanical hard disk. Due to a short lifespan of the mechanical hard
disk, the lifespan of the SAUc board is about 5 years.
The lifespan of the board is shortened by adverse environments, such as high temperature and
high altitude.
To ensure the lifespan of the SAUc board, the SAUc board must be protected against vibration,
shock and abnormal shutdown.

6.21 SCUa Board


SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.

6.21.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
The SCUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides the maintenance management function
l Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Supports the port trunking function


l Supports the active/standby switchover
l Enables inter-subrack connections
l Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s
l Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.21.2 Panel of the SCUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.

Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

Figure 6-27 Panel of the SCUa board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.21.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-85 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 6-85 LEDs on the SCUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.21.4 Ports on the SCUa Board


There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
Table 6-86 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-86 Ports on the SCUa board

Port Function Connector


Type

10/100/100 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the inter- RJ45


0BASE-T0 subrack connection.
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T9

10/100/100 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unused RJ45
0BASE- in the BSC6900.
T10 to
10/100/100
0BASE-
T11

COM Serial port for commissioning. RJ45

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8 RJ45
kHz and the 1 PPS clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa
board.

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for SMB male
testing. connector

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board


The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

Table 6-87 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.

Table 6-87 Technical specifications of the SCUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 54.5 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s

Figure 6-28 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with
two SCUa boards.

Figure 6-28 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUa
boards

NOTE

If only one SCUa board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.

6.22 SCUb Board


SCUb refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:b. The SCUb board is mandatory.
Two SCUb boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.
NOTE

SCUa and SCUb boards cannot be simultaneously installed in slots 6 and 7 of the same subrack.
SCUa and SCUb boards can be simultaneously installed in two separate subracks of the same or different
cabinets. For example, two SCUa boards are installed in subrack 0, and two SCUb boards are installed in subrack
1.

6.22.1 Functions of the SCUb Board


The SCUb board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the
BSC6900.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

The SCUb board performs the following functions:


l Provides the maintenance management function
l Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet
l Supports the port trunking function
l Supports the active/standby switchover
l Enables inter-subrack connections
l Provides a total switching capacity of 240 Gbit/s
l Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.22.2 Panel of the SCUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUb board.
Figure 6-29 shows the panel of the SCUb board.

Figure 6-29 Panel of the SCUb board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 6-88 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 6-88 LEDs on the SCUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

6.22.4 Ports on the SCUb Board


There are 15 ports on the SCUb board.

Table 6-89 describes the ports on the SCUb board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-89 Ports on the SCUb board

Port Function Connector


Type

10/100/100 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the inter- RJ45


0BASE-T0 subrack connection
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T5

10/100/100 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unused RJ45
0BASE-T6 in the BSC6900.
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T7

10G-T8 to 10 Gbit/s Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack SFP+


10G-T811 connection. These ports can use SFP+ High-Speed cable
transmission.

COM Serial port for commissioning RJ45

CLKIN Input port for reference clock signals, used to receive the 8 RJ45
kHz and the 1 PPS clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa
board

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are used for SMB male
testing. connector

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board


The technical specifications of the SCUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

Table 6-90 describes the technical specifications of the SCUb board.

Table 6-90 Technical specifications of the SCUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 78 W

Weight 1.5 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 240 Gbit/s

Figure 6-30 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with
two SCUb boards.

Figure 6-30 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUb
boards

NOTE

If only one SCUb board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.

6.23 SPUa Board


SPUa refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:a. The SPUa board is optional. Two to eighteen
SPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUa boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots
26 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots
26 to 27 of the MPS.
l The SPUa board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.23.1 Functions of the SPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the SPUa board is functionally divided into main control SPUa
board and non-main control SPUa board. The main control SPUa board is used to manage the
UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUa board is used
to process the UMTS services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an SPUa board:
l If Logical function type is set to RUCP, the SPUa board serves as a main control SPUa board.
l If Logical function type is set to UCP, the SPUa board serves as a non-main control SPUa board.

Main Control SPUa Board


The main control SPUa board has four logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control SPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-
RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control SPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control SPUa Board


The non-main control SPUa board has four logical subsystems.
The four subsystems of the non-main control SPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used to
process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

6.23.2 Panel of the SPUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUa board.

Figure 6-31 shows the panel of the SPUa board.

Figure 6-31 Panel of the SPUa board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.23.3 LEDs on the SPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-91 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 6-91 LEDs on the SPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.23.4 Ports on the SPUa Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUa board.

Table 6-92 describes the ports on the SPUa board.

Table 6-92 Ports on the SPUa board

Port Function

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to Ethernet ports


10/100/1000BASE-T3

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board


The technical specifications of the SPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-93 describes the technical specifications of the SPUa board.

Table 6-93 Technical specifications of the SPUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 76.60 W

Weight 1.60 kg

Temperature required for the long-term 0°C to 45°C


operation

Temperature required for the short-term -5°C to +55°C


operation

Relative humidity required for the long- 5% to 85%


term operation

Relative humidity required for the short- 5% to 95%


term operation

Processing capability of the main control Supporting 100 NodeBs, 300 cells, and 67,500
SPUa board BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main Supporting 100 NodeBs, 300 cells, and 90,000
control SPUa board Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)

NOTE

The preceding BHCA specification is calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. The BHCA
specification configured for an SPU depends on the actual traffic model.
For details of Huawei traffic model, see theBSC6900 Configuration Principles.

6.24 SPUb Board


SPUb refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:b. The SPUb board is optional. Two to eighteen
SPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the SPUb boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23 and slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUb
boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5 and slots 8 to 27.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed in slots
26 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed in slots
26 to 27 of the MPS.
l The SPUb board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.24.1 Functions of the SPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the SPUb board is functionally divided into main control SPUb
board and non-main control SPUb board. The main control SPUb board is used to manage the
UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUb board is used
to process the UMTS services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an SPUb board:
l If Logical function type is set to RUCP, the SPUb board serves as a main control SPUb board.
l If Logical function type is set to UCP, the SPUb board serves as a non-main control SPUb board.

Main Control SPUb Board


The main control SPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control SPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-
RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control SPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control SPUb Board


The non-main control SPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
The eight subsystems of the non-main control SPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

6.24.2 Panel of the SPUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUb board.

Figure 6-32 shows the panel of the SPUb board.

Figure 6-32 Panel of the SPUb board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.24.3 LEDs on the SPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-94 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.

Table 6-94 LEDs on the SPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.24.4 Ports on the SPUb Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUb board.

Table 6-95 describes the ports on the SPUb board.

Table 6-95 Ports on the SPUb board

Port Function

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to Ethernet ports


10/100/1000BASE-T3

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board


The technical specifications of the SPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-96 describes the technical specifications of the SPUb board.

Table 6-96 Technical specifications of the SPUb board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 52.3 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Temperature required for the long-term 0°C to 45°C


operation

Temperature required for the short-term -5°C to +55°C


operation

Relative humidity required for the long- 5% to 85%


term operation

Relative humidity required for the short- 5% to 95%


term operation

Processing capability of the main control Supporting 180 NodeBs, 600 cells, and 114,000
SPUb board BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main Supporting 180 NodeBs, 600 cells, and 130,000
control SPUb board BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding BHCA specification is calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. The BHCA
specification configured for an SPU depends on the actual traffic model.
For details of Huawei traffic model, see theBSC6900 Configuration Principles.

6.25 UOIa Board


UOIa refers to 4-port ATM over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit REV:a.
The UOIa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of
UOIa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIa board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the UOIa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the UOIa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the UOIa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.25.1 Functions of the UOIa Board


As an optical interface board, the UOIa board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c
transmission.
The UOIa board performs the following functions:
l Provides four unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c optical interfaces
l Supports ATM over SDH/SONET
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby UOIa boards
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.25.2 Panel of the UOIa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIa board.
Figure 6-33 shows the panel of the UOIa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-33 Panel of the UOIa board

6.25.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board


There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-97 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.

Table 6-97 LEDs on the UOIa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.25.4 Ports on the UOIa Board


There are four optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the UOIa board.

Table 6-98 describes the ports on the UOIa board.

Table 6-98 Ports on the UOIa board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive LC/PC


optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting
TX optical port, and RX refers to the receiving
optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board


The technical specifications of the UOIa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-99 describes the hardware specifications of the UOIa board.

Table 6-99 Hardware specifications of the UOIa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of


the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 30.05 W

Weight 1.15 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity 5% to 85%


(long-term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-100 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM
transmission mode.

Table 6-100 Specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM transmission
mode
Item Specification

Number of channel identifiers (CIDs) 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 300

Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 450 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 150 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 385 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 535 Mbit/s


+DL)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

Table 6-101 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the UOIa board.

Table 6-101 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

6.26 UOIc Board


UOIc refers to 8-port ATM over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit REV:c.
The UOIc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of UOIc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. When the MPS/EPS is configured with the
SCUa board, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/EPS. When the MPS/

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 27 in the
MPS/EPS.

6.26.1 Functions of the UOIc Board


As an optical interface board, the UOIc board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c
transmission.
The UOIc board performs the following functions:
l Provides eight channels over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c optical ports
l Supports ATM over SDH/SONET
l Supports the extraction of line clock signals
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby UOIc boards
l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.26.2 Panel of the UOIc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIc board.
Figure 6-34 shows the panel of the UOIc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-34 Panel of the UOIc board

6.26.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-102 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.

Table 6-102 LEDs on the UOIc board

LED Colo Status Description


r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Colo Status Description


r

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.26.4 Ports on the UOIc Board


There are eight optical ports on the UOIc board.
Table 6-103 describes the ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-103 Ports on the UOIc board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive LC/PC


optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting
TX optical port, and RX refers to the receiving
optical port.

6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board


The technical specifications of the UOIc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-104 describes the hardware specifications of the UOIc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-104 Hardware specifications of the UOIc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the
subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 86.52 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating 0°C to 45°C


temperature (long-
term)

Operating -5°C to +55°C


temperature (short-
term)

Relative humidity 5% to 85%


(long-term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-105 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-105 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Number of channel identifiers (CIDs) 79,000

Session setup/release times 5,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500

Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL 1200 Mbit/s


+DL)

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 900 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 900 Mbit/s

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (UL 1,800 Mbit/s


+DL)

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-
interface board.
l The Iur-interface service processing specifications of the board are the same as its Iub-interface service
processing specifications.
l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s. The
average length of packets over the Iu-PS interface is 420 Bytes.

Table 6-106 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-106 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board


Item Specification

Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155 Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-2 km- M-1310 nm-15 km- M-1310 nm-40 km-
MM-SFP SM-ESFP SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum 2 km 15 km 40 km
optical
transmission
distance

Maximum -14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm


output optical
power

Minimum -30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm


receiver
sensitivity

Center 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm


wavelength

Transmission 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s


rate

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and
internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
7.2 PGND Cables
The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
7.3 Optical Cable
The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)
The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/
combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split
one input into two.
7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
AEUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.
7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby AEUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.
7.9 BITS Clock Cable
The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the
BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock
conversion cables.
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable
The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cables. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa/SCUb board in the EPS.
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable
The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa/GCGa board.
7.12 Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
OMUc/FG2c board to other devices. The number of straight-through cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.
7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable
The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable
The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
7.17 OMU serial port cable
The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable
The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable


The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and
internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

Power Cable Description


The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution
box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal
power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal
power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.
Table 7-1 describes the external power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet. Table 7-2 describes
the external power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet.

Table 7-1 External power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet


Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity
Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Externa Blue 25/35 2-hole JG OT terminal/-48 Four per


l -48 V terminal/-48 V DC V DC output cabinet
power input port on the port on the PDF
cable power distribution
box

Externa Black 25/35 2-hole JG OT terminal/-48 Four per


l RTN terminal/-48 V DC V DC output cabinet
power input port on the port on the PDF
cable power distribution
box

Table 7-2 External power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet


Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity
Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Externa Blue 25/35 OT terminal/-48 V OT Four per


l -48 V DC input port on the terminal/-48 V cabinet
power power distribution DC output port
cable box on the PDF

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Externa Black 25/35 OT terminal/-48 V OT Four per


l RTN DC input port on the terminal/-48 V cabinet
power power distribution DC output port
cable box on the PDF

NOTE

The cables delivered to different countries and regions are different in color and appearance. If engineers
are to purchase the cables in the local area, ensure that the cables purchased meet the local specifications.

The connectors of the internal power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet are the same as those for
the N68E-21-N cabinet. Table 7-3 describes the internal power cables.

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (1)

Cable Color Cross- Connector Type 1/ Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Installation Type 2/
Area Position 1 Installation
Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 10 OT terminal/-48 V OT Two per


-48 V DC output port on terminal/-48 V subrack
DC the power DC input port
power distribution box on the subrack
cable

Internal Black 10 OT terminal/-48 V OT Two per


RTN DC output port on terminal/-48 V subrack
power the power DC input port
cable distribution box on the subrack

Table 7-4 Internal power cables (2)

Cable Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 2 OT D-type Two per subrack


-48 V terminal/-48 V connector/
DC DC input port power input
power on the power port on the
cable distribution independent
box fan subrack

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Cable Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Name Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Black 2 OT D-type Two per subrack


RTN terminal/-48 V connector/
power DC input port power input
cable on the power port on the
distribution independent
box fan subrack

Appearance
Figure 7-1 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

Figure 7-1 Internal power cable for subracks

(1) OT terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-3 shows the external power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet.

Figure 7-3 External power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet

(1) OT terminal

Figure 7-4 shows the external power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-4 External power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet

(1) OT terminal (2) 2-hole JG terminal

7.2 PGND Cables


The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are
combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent
cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.
Table 7-5 describes the PGND cables.

Table 7-5 PGND cables


Cable Color Cross- Connect Connector Quantity
Name Sectional or Type Type 2/
Area 1/ Installation
Installati Position 2
mm2
on
Position
1

External Green and 25/35 OT OT terminal/ One per


PGND yellow terminal/ PGND output cabinet
cable Groundin port on the PDF
g bolt at
the top
rear of
each
cabinet

Inter- Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ Three


cabinet yellow terminal/ PGND busbar of between
PGND PGND each cabinet every two
cable busbar of adjacent
each cabinets
cabinet

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Cable Color Cross- Connect Connector Quantity


Name Sectional or Type Type 2/
Area 1/ Installation
Installati Position 2
mm2
on
Position
1

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/Port One per


cable for yellow terminal/ for PGND cable power
the power PGND on the power distribution
distributio busbar of distribution box box
n box each
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/Port Two per


cable for yellow terminal/ for the PGND subrack
the subrack PGND cable on the
busbar of subrack
each
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ Eight per


cable for yellow terminal/ Grounding bolt cabinet
the cabinet Groundin on the cabinet
door g bolt on door
the base

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ One per


cable for yellow terminal/ Grounding point independent
the PGND of the fan subrack
independe busbar of independent fan
nt fan each subrack
subrack cabinet

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for
the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6
shows the other PGND cables.

Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.3 Optical Cable


The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable


According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be
classified into the following types:
l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical
interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site
requirements.
l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the
ODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.
l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with
temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected
to the RX port.

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical
signals cannot be received or transmitted.

BSC6900 Optical Cables


Table 7-6 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.

Table 7-6 BSC6900 optical cables

Optical Cable Type Appearance

LC/PC-LC/PC single-
mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-FC/PC single-
mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-SC/PC single-
mode/multi-mode

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Installation
The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board
in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC
connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the
optical cable.

Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)


The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/
combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split
one input into two.

Function
The optical splitter/combiner splits or combines optical signals.
Figure 7-8 shows the operating principle of an optical combiner.

Figure 7-8 Operating principle of an optical combiner

Figure 7-9 shows the operating principle of an optical splitter.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-9 Operating principle of an optical splitter

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.
Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.

Appearance
Figure 7-10 shows the optical splitter/combiner.

Figure 7-10 Optical splitter/combiner

Classification
The optical splitter/combiner can be classified into the following types according to the mode
in which optical signals are transmitted:

l Single-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the single-mode optical splitter/
combinter is yellow.
l Multi-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the multi-mode optical splitter/
combiner is orange.

Application Scenario
When optical interface boards work in active/standby mode and optical transmission devices
work in independent mode, optical splitters/combiners can be used to improve the redundancy
performance of optical interface boards.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

CAUTION
Only the AOUa, UOIa, AOUc, POUc, and UOIc boards can be connected to an optical splitter/
combiner.
The optical splitter/combiner cannot be used to solve any of the following problems:
l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. When the
transmission on the TX optical fiber for the active optical port is interrupted, the BSC6900
reports a Multiplex Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm on the active and
standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active
and standby optical ports.
l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The
transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the
TX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a MS RDI alarm on the active and
standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active
and standby optical ports.
l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The
transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the
RX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm on
the active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered
between the active and standby optical ports.

Installation
Figure 7-11 shows the installation positions of optical splitters/combiners.

Figure 7-11 Installation positions of optical splitters/combiners

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
AEUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial
cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the
16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Figure 7-12 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)
(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector
to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment
The outer shield layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal
case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-7 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors
for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-7 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables
Pin of W1 Remarks Pin of W2 Remarks
DB44 DB44
Connec Signal Micro Connec Signal Micro
tor Coaxia tor Coaxia
l Cable l Cable
Identif Identif
ier ier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

Table 7-8 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-7.

Table 7-8 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal Bearer

Ring Shield layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip Core of micro coaxial cables

Installation
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the AEUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.

Appearance
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All
of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Figure 7-13 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Figure 7-13 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need
to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-9 and Table 7-11 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-9 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Remark X1 W4 Remark
s s
Pin of Signal Micro Pin of Signal Micro
DB44 Coaxial DB44 Coaxial
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

NOTE

In Table 7-9, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.
Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-10 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-9.

Table 7-10 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shield layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-11 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


W2 W1

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks


Connector Connector Connector Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

NOTE

In Table 7-11, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer of
the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected
to the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through
transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-14 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-14 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby AEUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-15 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of
the cable)
(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a
connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Pin Assignment
The outer shield layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the
metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-12 describes the pin assignment of the DB44
connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Pin of W1 Color Pin of W2 Color
DB44 DB44
Connec Signal 120- Connec Signal 120-
tor Ohm tor Ohm
Twisted Twisted
Pair Pair
Cable Cable
Identifie Identifie
r r

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White

34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

Table 7-13 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-12.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-13 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/
T1 signals

Installation
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the AEUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-16 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-16 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer
of the cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You
need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-14 and Table 7-16 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4


X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color

Pin of Signal Twiste Pin of Signal Twiste


DB44 d Pair DB44 d Pair
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White

34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

NOTE

In Table 7-14, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-15 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-14.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-15 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
to the BSC6900

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals to the BSC6900

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
from the BSC6900

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals from the BSC6900

Table 7-16 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Pin of X1 Pin of X2


Connector Connector Connector Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

NOTE

In Table 7-16, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer of
the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are
connected to the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby
120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another
NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair
cable can also be connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-17 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Figure 7-17 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

7.9 BITS Clock Cable


The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the
BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock
conversion cables.

Appearance
Figure 7-18 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-18 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector (2) Label

Figure 7-19 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Figure 7-19 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector 2Label

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is
used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the
connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa/GCGa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.
Figure 7-20 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable


The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cables. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa/SCUb board in the EPS.

NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance
Figure 7-21 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-21 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa/SCUb
board in the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the
active and standby GCUa/GCGa boards in the MPS.
Figure 7-22 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable


The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa/GCGa board.

NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent
to the GCUa/GCGa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is
not required.

Appearance
Figure 7-23 shows the line clock signal cable.

Figure 7-23 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector

Installation
One end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface
board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa/GCGa board.

7.12 Straight-Through Cable


The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
OMUc/FG2c board to other devices. The number of straight-through cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-24 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-24 Shielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-25 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-25 Unshielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-17 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-
through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-17 Pins of the straight-through cable


X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

Installation
l When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different
subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards
that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-26.

Figure 7-26 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the
SCUa boards in different subracks

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa/OMUc board to
other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1
on the OMUa/OMUc board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is
connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices.
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c board to other
devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
Ethernet port on the other devices.

7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan


Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-27 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-27 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end
and a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-18 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Table 7-18 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Tx-

X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.2 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 GND -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is


connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shield layer.

Table 7-19 describes the signals listed in Table 7-18.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-19 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at
the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.

NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to
top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the
bottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable


The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type
must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal
cable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-28 shows an alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-28 Alarm box signal cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-20 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-20 Pins of the alarm box signal cable


RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port
on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
serial port on the LMT.
Figure 7-29 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-29 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution


Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance
Figure 7-30 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Figure 7-30 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and
a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Table 7-21 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Tx-

X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.6 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 RTN -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is


connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shield layer.

Table 7-22 describes the signals listed in Table 7-21.

Table 7-22 Signals


Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is
connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the
other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-31 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-31 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable


The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

Appearance
Figure 7-32 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.

Figure 7-32 GPS signal transmission cable

X1: SMA male connector X2: N-type female connector X3: N-type male connector

Installation
Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of
a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmission
cable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of
the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.17 OMU serial port cable


The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance
Figure 7-33 shows the OMU serial port cable.

Figure 7-33 OMU serial port cable

Pin Assignment
Both ends of the OMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-23 lists the
pins of the OMU serial port cable.

Table 7-23 Pins of the OMU serial port cable


DB9 DB9

2 3

3 2

5 5

Installation Position
One end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The
other end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance
terminal.

NOTE
The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable


The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Appearance
Figure 7-34 shows the RS485 communication cable.

Figure 7-34 RS485 communication cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-24 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.

Table 7-24 Pins of the RS485 communication cable

RJ45 DB9

4 2

1 3

5 6

2 7

Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9
female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end
of the cable is connected to the J2 port on a power distribution box.

NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal
cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is
recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not
sufficient.

7.19 SFP+ High-Speed Cable


The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-35 shows the SFP+ high-speed cable.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-35 SFP+ high-speed cable

Installation
The two connectors at the two ends of the SFP+ high-speed cable are connected to the 10G
Ethernet ports on the SCUb boards that are located in different subracks.

Length of SFP+ high-speed cable


The lengths of SFP+ high-speed cable can be three or five meters.
When two cabinets are configured in the BSC6900 and a SCUb board is configured for each
subrack, the two cabinets must be installed side by side, because the length of SFP+ high-speed
cable is limited.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
8.11 LEDs on the NIUa Board

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

There are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.12 LEDs on the OMUa Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
8.13 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
8.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
8.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.16 LEDs on the POUa Board
There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.17 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.18 LEDs on the SAUa Board
There are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.
8.19 LEDs on the SAUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.
8.20 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.21 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
8.22 LEDs on the SPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.23 LEDs on the SPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.24 LEDs on the UOIa Board
There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.25 LEDs on the UOIc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the AEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the AOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the AOUc board


LED Colo Status Description
r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n
ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.
0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUb board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUe board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.11 LEDs on the NIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the NIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the NIUa board.

Table 8-11 LEDs on the NIUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

8.12 LEDs on the OMUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.
Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 8-12 LEDs on the OMUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written.

8.13 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the OMUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written.

8.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-14 LEDs on the PAMU board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

8.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 8-15 LEDs on the PEUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.16 LEDs on the POUa Board


There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Table 8-16 LEDs on the POUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.17 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8.18 LEDs on the SAUa Board


There are five types of LEDs on the SAUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HD, and OFFLINE.
Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the SAUa board.

Table 8-18 LEDs on the SAUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is an alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is being


read or written.

Blinking Data on the hard disk is being read


or written.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.19 LEDs on the SAUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the SAUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, HDD, and OFL.
Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the SAUc board.

Table 8-19 LEDs on the SAUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is an alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HDD Green OFF No data on the hard disk is being


read or written.

Blinking Data on the hard disk is being read


or written.

8.20 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-20 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.21 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 8-21 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 8-21 LEDs on the SCUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

8.22 LEDs on the SPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-22 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 8-22 LEDs on the SPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

8.23 LEDs on the SPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-23 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.

Table 8-23 LEDs on the SPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

8.24 LEDs on the UOIa Board


There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-24 describes the LEDs on the UOIa board.

Table 8-24 LEDs on the UOIa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.25 LEDs on the UOIc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-25 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.

Table 8-25 LEDs on the UOIc board

LED Colo Status Description


r

RUN Gree ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.


n
ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.
0.125s

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Colo Status Description


r

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree ON The board is in active mode.


n
OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree ON The STM-1 port does not receive


n signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

9 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board
The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board
The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
9.7 DIP Switches on the POUa Board
The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant Startup type of the subrack, generally set to OFF
bit)

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Set bit 8 to OFF.
4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 9-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OF ON ON OFF ON OFF
F

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OF ON ON ON ON OFF
F

9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board


The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-2, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-2 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches


DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-3 describes S2, S4, S6,
S8, and S10.

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 31
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 23
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 7
OFF Set the working mode
to other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch ON Set the working mode


of E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to E1 unbalanced mode
to 15

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

OFF Set the working mode


to other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for (ON, ON) Set the working mode
setting the to E1 unbalanced mode
working mode,
consisting of two (OFF, ON) Set the working mode
bits to E1 balanced mode

(ON, OFF) Set the working mode


to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Set the working mode


to J1 mode

9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board


The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is
faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 9-4 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Table 9-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Set loading mode to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Set loading mode to CPU slave parallel


configuration

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch Bit Setting of Meaning


DIP Bit

3 ON Set working mode to T1 mode

OFF Set working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Set the mapped path to AU3

OFF Set the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Set the information structure to TU11

OFF Set the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
9-5.

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-6 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.

Table 9-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board


DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning
Switc Switch
h

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the (ON, ON) Setting the
working mode, working mode to
consisting of two bits E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the


working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
J1 mode

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-7. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description
Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant OFF 1


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description
Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

9.7 DIP Switches on the POUa Board


The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches
are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches


Figure 9-8 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-8 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

CAUTION
All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel
is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches


Table 9-9 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Table 9-9 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board


DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode


to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode


to CPU slave parallel
configuration

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 UMTS
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning

3 ON Setting working mode


to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode


to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped


path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped


path to AU4

5 ON Setting the
information structure
to TU11

OFF Setting the


information structure
to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

Issue Draft A (2012-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Вам также может понравиться